blob: 8f1626a149a5b2f484d97791974cce6234a153bc [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
24#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000025#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000030#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000031#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000032#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000034#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000035#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000037#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
40#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000045#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
46#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000049#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000050#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
53#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000054#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000056#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000057#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000058#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000059#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
60#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
61#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000062#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000063#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000064#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000065#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000066#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000067#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000068#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000069#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000070#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000071#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000072#include <cassert>
73#include <climits>
74#include <cstddef>
75#include <cstdint>
76#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000077#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000078#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000079#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000080#include <utility>
81#include <vector>
82
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000083using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000084using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000085
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000086#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
87
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000088// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
89// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
90// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
91// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000092static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
93 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
94 cl::desc(
95 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
96
97static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
98 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
99 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +0000100
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000101static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000102 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
103 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000104
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000105static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
106 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
107 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000108
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000109static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
110 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
111 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
112 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
113 "predicated store"));
114
115static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
116 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
117 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
118 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
119
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000120static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
121 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
122 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
123 "executed"));
124
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000125static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
126 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
127 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
128 "speculatively executed instructions"));
129
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000130STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
133STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
134 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
135STATISTIC(
136 NumLookupTablesHoles,
137 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000138STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000139STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
140 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000141STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000142
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000143namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000144
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000145// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
146// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
147// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000148using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
149 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
150
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000151// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
152// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
153// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000154using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000155
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000156/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
157struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
158 ConstantInt *Value;
159 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000160
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000161 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000162 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
163
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000164 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
165 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
166 return Value < RHS.Value;
167 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000168
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000169 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
170};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000171
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000172class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000173 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000174 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000175 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000176 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
177
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000178 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000179 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
180 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000181 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000182 BasicBlock *Pred,
183 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000184 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
185 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000186
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000187 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000188 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000189 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
190 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000191 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000192 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000193 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000194 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000195 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
196 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000197
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000198public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000199 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000200 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000201 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000202 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000203
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000204 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
205};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000206
207} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000208
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000209/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000210/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000211static bool
212SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000213 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000214 if (SI1 == SI2)
215 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000216
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000217 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
218 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
219 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
220 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
221 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000222
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000223 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
224 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000225 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
226 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
227 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000228 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
229 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000230 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
231 if (FailBlocks)
232 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
233 Fail = true;
234 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000235 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000236
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000237 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000238}
239
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000240/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
241/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
242/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000243static bool
244isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
245 Instruction *Cond,
246 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
247 if (SI1 == SI2)
248 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000249 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
250
251 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000252 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000253 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
254 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
255 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
256 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000257 if (!Ci2)
258 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000259 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
260 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
261 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
262 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
263 return false;
264
265 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
266 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000267 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000268 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
269 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
270 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000271 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
272 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000273 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000274 return false;
275 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
276 }
277 return true;
278}
279
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000280/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
281/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
282/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
283/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000284static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
285 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000286 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
287 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000288
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000289 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000290 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000291 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000292}
293
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000294/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
295/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
296/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000297/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000298static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000299 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000300 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000301 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000302 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000303}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000304
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000305/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
306/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000307/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
308/// which works well enough for us.
309///
310/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000311/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
312/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
313/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
314/// set and true is returned.
315///
316/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
317/// Select whose cost is 2.
318///
319/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
320/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
321/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000322static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000323 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000324 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000325 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
326 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000327 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
328 // so limit the recursion depth.
329 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
330 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
331 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
332 return false;
333
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000334 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000335 if (!I) {
336 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
337 // can be executed unconditionally.
338 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
339 if (C->canTrap())
340 return false;
341 return true;
342 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000343 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000344
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000345 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000346 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000347 if (PBB == BB)
348 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000349
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000350 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
351 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
353 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000354 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000355 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000356
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000357 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
358 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000359 if (!AggressiveInsts)
360 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000361
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000362 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000363 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
364 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000365
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000366 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
367 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
368 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000369 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000370 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000371
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000372 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000373
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000374 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
375 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
376 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
377 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
378 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
379 // enabled further IR optimizations.
380 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
381 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000382 return false;
383
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000384 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
385 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000386
387 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
388 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000389 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000390 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
391 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000392 return false;
393 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
394 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000395 return true;
396}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000397
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000398/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000400static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000401 // Normal constant int.
402 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404 return CI;
405
406 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
407 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000408 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000409
410 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
411 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
412 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
413
414 // IntToPtr const int.
415 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
416 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
417 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
418 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
419 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
420 return CI;
421 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000422 return cast<ConstantInt>(
423 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000424 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000425 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000426}
427
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000428namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000429
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000430/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
431/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
432/// structure.
433/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
434/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
435/// representing the different cases for the switch.
436/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
437/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
438/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
439/// fail.
440struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000441 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000442
443 /// Value found for the switch comparison
444 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
445
446 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
447 Value *Extra = nullptr;
448
449 /// Set of integers to match in switch
450 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
451
452 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
453 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000454
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000455 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000456 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000457 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000458 }
459
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000460 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000461 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000462 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000463
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000464private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000465 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
466 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
467 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000468 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
469 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000470 CompValue = NewVal;
471 return (CompValue != nullptr);
472 }
473
474 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
475 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
476 /// match depending on isEQ).
477 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
478 /// against is placed in CompValue.
479 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
480 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000481 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000482 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
483 ICmpInst *ICI;
484 ConstantInt *C;
485 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000486 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000487 return false;
488 }
489
490 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000491 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000492
493 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000494 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000495 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000496 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000497 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
498 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
499
500 /*
501 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
502 x : BITVECTOR(64);
503 y : BITVECTOR(64);
504 z : BITVECTOR(64);
505 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
506 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
507 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
508 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000509 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
510 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
511 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000512 */
513
514 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
515 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
516 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
517 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
518 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
519 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
520 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
521
522 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
523 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
524 //
525 // mask = (1 << z)
526 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
527 //
528 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
529 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
530
531 // Pattern match a special case:
532 /*
533 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
534 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
535 );
536 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000538 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
539 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000540 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000541 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000542 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000543 return false;
544
545 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000546 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000547 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
548 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549 UsedICmps++;
550 return true;
551 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000552 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000553
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000554 // Pattern match a special case:
555 /*
556 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
557 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
558 );
559 */
560 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
561 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
562 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
563 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
564 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
565 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
566 return false;
567
568 Vals.push_back(C);
569 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
570 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
571 UsedICmps++;
572 return true;
573 }
574 }
575
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000576 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000577 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000578 return false;
579
580 UsedICmps++;
581 Vals.push_back(C);
582 return ICI->getOperand(0);
583 }
584
585 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000586 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
587 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000588
589 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
590 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
591 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000592 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
593 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000594 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
595 }
596
597 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
598 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
599 // x != 0 && x != 1.
600 if (!isEQ)
601 Span = Span.inverse();
602
603 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000604 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000606 }
607
608 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000609 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000610 return false;
611
612 // Add all values from the range to the set
613 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
614 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000615
616 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000618 }
619
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000620 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000621 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
622 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
623 /// vector.
624 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000625 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000626 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
627 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000628
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
630 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000631 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000632
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000633 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000634 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000635 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000636
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000637 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000638 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000639
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000640 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
641 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
642 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000643 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
644 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
645 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
646 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000647 continue;
648 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000649
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000650 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000651 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000652 // Match succeed, continue the loop
653 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000654 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000655
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000656 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
657 // comparison against the same value as the others.
658 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
659 if (!Extra) {
660 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000661 continue;
662 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000663 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
664 CompValue = nullptr;
665 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000666 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000667 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000668};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000669
670} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000671
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000672static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000673 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000674 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
675 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
676 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
677 if (BI->isConditional())
678 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000679 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
680 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000681 }
682
683 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000684 if (Cond)
685 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000686}
687
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000688/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000689/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000690Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000691 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000692 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
693 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
694 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000695 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
696 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
697 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000698 CV = SI->getCondition();
699 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000700 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000701 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000702 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000703 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000704 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000705
706 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000707 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000708 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
709 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000710 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000711 CV = Ptr;
712 }
713 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000714 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000715}
716
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000717/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000718/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000719BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
720 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000721 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000722 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000723 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
724 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
725 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000726 return SI->getDefaultDest();
727 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000728
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000729 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000730 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000731 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000732 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
733 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000734 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000735}
736
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000737/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000738/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000739static void
740EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
741 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000742 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000743}
744
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000745/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000746static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
747 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000748 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
749
750 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
751 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
752 std::swap(V1, V2);
753
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000754 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000755 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000756 if (V1->size() == 1) {
757 // Just scan V2.
758 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
759 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
760 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
761 return true;
762 }
763
764 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
765 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
766 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
767 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
768 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
769 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
770 return true;
771 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
772 ++i1;
773 else
774 ++i2;
775 }
776 return false;
777}
778
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000779// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
780// least one non-zero weight.
781static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
782 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
783 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
784 MDNode *N = nullptr;
785 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
786 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
787 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
788}
789
790// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
791// exactly 2 weights.
792static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
793 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
794 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
795 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
796 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
797 MDNode *N = nullptr;
798 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
799 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
800 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
801 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
802}
803
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000804/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
805/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
806/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
807/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
808/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000809bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
810 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000811 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000812 if (!PredVal)
813 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000814
815 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
816 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000817 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
818 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000819
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000820 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
821 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
822
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000823 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000824 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000825 BasicBlock *PredDef =
826 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
827 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000828
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000829 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000830 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000831 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000832 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000833
834 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
835 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
836 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
837 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
838 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
839 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000840 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000841 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000842
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000843 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
844 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
845 // uncond br.
846 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
847 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000848 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000849 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000850
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000851 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000852 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000853
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000854 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000855 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
856 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000857
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000858 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
859 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000860 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000861
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000862 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
863 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000864 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000865 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
866 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000867
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000868 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000869 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000870
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000871 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
872 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000873 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000874 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
875 if (HasWeight)
876 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
877 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000878 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000879 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
880 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000881 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
882 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000883 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000884 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000885 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000886 Weights.pop_back();
887 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000888 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000889 SI->removeCase(i);
890 }
891 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000892 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000893 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000894
895 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000896 return true;
897 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000898
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000899 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
900 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000901 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000902 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000903 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
904 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000905 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000906 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000907 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
908 }
909 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000910
911 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
912 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000913 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000914 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
915 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
916 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
917 break;
918 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000919
920 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000921 if (!TheRealDest)
922 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000923
924 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
925 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000926 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
927 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
928 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000929 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000930 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000931
932 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000933 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000934 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000935
936 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000937 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
938 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000939
940 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
941 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000942}
943
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000944namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000945
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000946/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
947/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
948/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
949struct ConstantIntOrdering {
950 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
951 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
952 }
953};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000954
955} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000956
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000957static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
958 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
959 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
960 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000961 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000962 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000963 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000964}
965
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000966static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000967 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000968 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000969 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000970 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
971
972 return false;
973}
974
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000975/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
976/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
977/// metadata.
978static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
979 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000980 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000981 assert(MD);
982 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000983 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000984 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000985 }
986
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000987 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
988 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
989 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000990 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000991 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
992 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
993 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
994 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000995 }
996}
997
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000998/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000999static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +00001000 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1001 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
1002 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
1003 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
1004 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +00001005 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001006}
1007
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001008/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1009/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001010/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1011/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001012bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
1013 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001014 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001015 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1017 bool Changed = false;
1018
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001019 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001020 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001021 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001022
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001023 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
1024 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001025 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001026
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001027 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001028 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001029 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1030 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001031 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001032 return false;
1033 }
1034 }
1035
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001036 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001037 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001038 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1039
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001040 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001041 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1042
1043 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1044 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1045 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001046 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001047
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001048 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1049 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001050 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1051 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1052
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001053 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001054 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001055 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001056 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1057 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1058 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001059 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1060 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1061 // successor's weights
1062 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001063
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001064 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001065 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001066 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001067 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001068 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1069 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1070 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001071 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001072
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001073 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1074 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1075 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001076 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001077 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1078 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1079 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1080 else {
1081 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1082 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001083
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001084 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1085 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001086 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1087 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001088 Weights.pop_back();
1089 }
1090
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001091 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001092 --i;
1093 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001094 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001095
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001096 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001097 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1098 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1099 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1100 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1101 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001102
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001103 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1104 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001105 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1106 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1107 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1108 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1109 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001110 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1111 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1112 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1113 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001114 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1115 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001116 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001117 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001118
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001119 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1120 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1121 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1122 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1123 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1124 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1125 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1126 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001127 } else {
1128 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1129 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1130 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001131 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1132 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001133 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1134 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1135 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001136
1137 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001138 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1139 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001140 Weights.pop_back();
1141 }
1142
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001143 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1144 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001145 --i;
1146 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001147 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001148
1149 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1150 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001151 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1152 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1153 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001154 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1155 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001156 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1157 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001158 PTIHandled.erase(
1159 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001160 }
1161
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001162 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1163 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001164 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001165 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001166 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1167 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001168 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001169 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001170 }
1171
1172 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1173 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1174 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001175 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1176 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001177
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001178 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001179 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001180 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001181 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001182 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001183 }
1184
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001185 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001186 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1187 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001188 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001189 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1190 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001191
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001192 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1193 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1194 FitWeights(Weights);
1195
1196 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1197
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001198 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001199 }
1200
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001201 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001202
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001203 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1204 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1205 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001206 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001207 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1208 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001209 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001210 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001211 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001212 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1213 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001214 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001215 }
1216 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1217 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001218
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001219 Changed = true;
1220 }
1221 }
1222 return Changed;
1223}
1224
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001225// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1226// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1227// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001228static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1229 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001230 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001231 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001232 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001233 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1234 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1235 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001236 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001237 return false;
1238 }
1239 }
1240 }
1241 return true;
1242}
1243
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001244static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1245
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001246/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1247/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1248/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001249static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001250 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001251 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1252 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1253 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1254 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1255 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001256 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1257 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001258
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001259 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1260 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1261
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001262 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001263 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1264 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1265 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1266 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1267 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001268 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001269 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001270 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001271 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001272 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001273 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001274 return false;
1275
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001276 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001277
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001278 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001279 do {
1280 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1281 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1282 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1283 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001284
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001285 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1286 return Changed;
1287
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001288 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1289 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1290 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001291 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001292 if (!I2->use_empty())
1293 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001294 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001295 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1296 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1297 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1298 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1299 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1300 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1301 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1302 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1303 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1304 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001305 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001306
Robert Lougherb0124c12017-01-12 21:11:09 +00001307 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1308 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001309 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001310
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001311 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001312 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001313
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001314 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1315 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001316 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1317 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1318 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1319 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1320 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001321 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001322 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001323 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001324 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001325 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001326
1327 return true;
1328
1329HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001330 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1331 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001332 return Changed;
1333
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001334 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001335 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001336 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001337 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1338 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1339 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1340 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1341 continue;
1342
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001343 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1344 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1345 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1346 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001347 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001348
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001349 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001350 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001351 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001352 return Changed;
1353 }
1354 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001355
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001356 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001357 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001358 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001359 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001360 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1361 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001362 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001363 }
1364
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001365 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001366 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1367 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1368 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1369 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001370 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001371 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001372 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001373 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001374 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001375 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1376 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001377 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1378 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001379
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001380 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1381 // that determines the right value.
1382 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001383 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001384 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1385 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1386 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001387
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001388 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1389 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1390 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1391 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001392 }
1393 }
1394
1395 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001396 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1397 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001398
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001399 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001400 return true;
1401}
1402
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001403// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1404// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1405// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1406// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1407// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1408static bool canSinkInstructions(
1409 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1410 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001411 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1412 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1413 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1414 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1415 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1416 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1417 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1418 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001419
1420 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1421 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1422 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1423 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1424 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1425 return false;
1426
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001427 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1428 // have no uses.
1429 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1430 return false;
1431 }
1432
1433 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1434 for (auto *I : Insts)
1435 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1436 return false;
1437
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001438 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1439 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1440 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1441 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001442 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1443 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001444 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001445 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001446 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001447 return (PNUse &&
1448 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1449 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1450 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001451 }))
1452 return false;
1453 }
1454
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001455 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1456 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1457 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1458 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1459 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1460 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1461 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1462 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1463 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1464 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1465 }))
1466 return false;
1467 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1468 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1469 }))
1470 return false;
1471
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001472 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1473 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1474 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1475 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001476
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001477 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001478 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1479 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001480 };
1481 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1482 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1483 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1484 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001485 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1486 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001487 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1488 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001489 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001490 for (auto *I : Insts)
1491 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001492 }
1493 }
1494 return true;
1495}
1496
1497// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1498// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1499// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001500static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001501 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1502
1503 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1504 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1505 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001506 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1507 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1508 do {
1509 I = I->getPrevNode();
1510 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1511 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1512 Insts.push_back(I);
1513 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001514
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001515 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1516 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1517 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1518 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001519 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001520 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1521 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1522 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1523 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1524 return U == PNUse;
1525 }))
1526 return false;
1527 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001528
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001529 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1530 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001531 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1532 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1533 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1534 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1535 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1536 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1537 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1538 // small mess we may make.
1539 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1540 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1541 });
1542 if (!NeedPHI) {
1543 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1544 continue;
1545 }
1546
1547 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1548 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1549 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1550 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1551 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1552 for (auto *I : Insts)
1553 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1554 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1555 }
1556
1557 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1558 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1559 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1560 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1561 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1562
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001563 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001564 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001565 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001566 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1567 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1568 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1569 // loop below.
1570 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1571 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1572 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1573 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001574 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001575 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1576 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001577
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001578 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1579 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1580 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1581 // instruction and nuke it.
1582 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1583 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1584 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1585 PN->eraseFromParent();
1586 }
1587
1588 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1589 for (auto *I : Insts)
1590 if (I != I0)
1591 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001592
1593 return true;
1594}
1595
1596namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001597
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001598 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1599 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1600 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1601 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1602 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1603 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1604 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1605 // ...
1606 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1607 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1608 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1609 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001610
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001611 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001612 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001613 reset();
1614 }
1615
1616 void reset() {
1617 Fail = false;
1618 Insts.clear();
1619 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001620 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1621 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1622 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1623 if (!Inst) {
1624 // Block wasn't big enough.
1625 Fail = true;
1626 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001627 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001628 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001629 }
1630 }
1631
1632 bool isValid() const {
1633 return !Fail;
1634 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001635
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001636 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001637 if (Fail)
1638 return;
1639 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001640 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1641 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001642 // Already at beginning of block.
1643 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001644 Fail = true;
1645 return;
1646 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001647 }
1648 }
1649
1650 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1651 return Insts;
1652 }
1653 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001654
1655} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001656
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001657/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001658/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1659/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1660/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1661static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1662 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001663 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1664
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001665 // We support two situations:
1666 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1667 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1668 //
1669 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1670 // else-if patterns;
1671 //
1672 // if (a) f(1);
1673 // else if (b) f(2);
1674 //
1675 // produces:
1676 //
1677 // [if]
1678 // / \
1679 // [f(1)] [if]
1680 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001681 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001682 // | [f(2)]|
1683 // \ | /
1684 // [ end ]
1685 //
1686 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1687 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1688 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1689 //
1690 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1691 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1692 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1693 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1694 //
1695 // [if]
1696 // / \
1697 // [x(1)] [if]
1698 // | | \
1699 // | | \
1700 // | [x(2)] |
1701 // \ / |
1702 // [sink.split] |
1703 // \ /
1704 // [ end ]
1705 //
1706 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1707 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1708 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1709 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1710 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1711 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1712 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1713 Cond = T;
1714 else
1715 return false;
1716 }
1717 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001718 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001719
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001720 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001721 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1722 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1723 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1724 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1725 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1726 // PHIOperands.
1727 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1728 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1729 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001730 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001731 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1732 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1733 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1734 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1735 ++ScanIdx;
1736 --LRI;
1737 }
1738
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001739 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001740 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1741 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1742 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1743 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1744 ++NumPHIdValues;
1745 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1746 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1747 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1748 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001749
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001750 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1751 };
1752
1753 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001754 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1755 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1756 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1757 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1758 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1759 LRI.reset();
1760 unsigned Idx = 0;
1761 bool Profitable = false;
1762 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1763 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1764 Profitable = true;
1765 break;
1766 }
1767 --LRI;
1768 ++Idx;
1769 }
1770 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001771 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001772
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001773 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1774 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1775 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1776 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1777 ".sink.split"))
1778 // Edges couldn't be split.
1779 return false;
1780 Changed = true;
1781 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001782
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001783 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1784 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1785 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1786 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1787 // per sunk instruction).
1788 //
1789 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1790 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1791 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1792 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1793 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1794 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1795 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1796 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001797 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001798 << "\n");
1799
1800 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1801 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001802 LRI.reset();
1803 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001804 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001805 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001806 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001807 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001808
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001809 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001810 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001811 NumSinkCommons++;
1812 Changed = true;
1813 }
1814 return Changed;
1815}
1816
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001817/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1818/// conditional block.
1819///
1820/// We are looking for code like the following:
1821/// BrBB:
1822/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1823/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1824/// ... // function).
1825/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1826/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1827/// ThenBB:
1828/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1829/// br label EndBB
1830/// EndBB:
1831/// ...
1832/// We are going to transform this into:
1833/// BrBB:
1834/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1835/// ... //
1836/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1837/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1838/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1839/// ...
1840///
1841/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1842/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001843static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1844 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001845 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1846 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001847 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001848
1849 // Volatile or atomic.
1850 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001851 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001852
1853 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1854
1855 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001856 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001857 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1858 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1859 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001860 // Skip debug info.
1861 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1862 continue;
1863 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001864
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001865 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001866 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001867 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001868
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001869 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1870 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1871 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1872 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1873 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001874 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001875 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001876 }
1877
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001878 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001879}
1880
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001881/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001882///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001883/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1884/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1885/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1886/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1887/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1888///
1889/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1890/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1891/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1892/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1893///
1894///
1895/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1896/// \code
1897/// BB:
1898/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1899/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1900/// ThenBB:
1901/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001902/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001903/// EndBB:
1904/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1905/// ...
1906/// \endcode
1907///
1908/// Into this IR:
1909/// \code
1910/// BB:
1911/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1912/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1913/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1914/// ...
1915/// \endcode
1916///
1917/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001918static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001919 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001920 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1921 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1922 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1923 return false;
1924
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001925 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1926 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1927
1928 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1929 // to swap the select operands later.
1930 bool Invert = false;
1931 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1932 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1933 Invert = true;
1934 }
1935 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1936
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001937 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1938 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1939 // - They are defined in BB, and
1940 // - They have no side effects, and
1941 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1942 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1943
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001944 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1945
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001946 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001947 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1948 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001949 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001950 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001951 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001952 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001953 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001954 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1955 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001956 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001957 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001958
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001959 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001960 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001961 ++SpeculationCost;
1962 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001963 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001964
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001965 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001966 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1967 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1968 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001969 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001970 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001971 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1972 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001973 return false;
1974
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001975 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1976 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1977 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1978
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001979 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001980 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001981 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001982 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001983 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001984 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001985 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1986
1987 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001988 }
1989 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001990
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001991 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1992 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1993 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001994 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1995 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1996 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001997 I != E; ++I)
1998 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001999 ++SpeculationCost;
2000 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002001 return false;
2002 }
2003
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002004 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2005 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002006 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002007 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002008 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2009 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002010
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002011 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002012 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002013 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002014 continue;
2015
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002016 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2017 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
2018 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
2019 return false;
2020
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002021 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002022 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2023 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2024 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002025 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2026
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002027 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2028 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002029 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002030 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2031 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002032 unsigned MaxCost =
2033 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002034 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002035 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002036
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002037 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2038 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2039 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002040 // constant expression.
2041 ++SpeculationCost;
2042 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002043 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002044 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002045
2046 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2047 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002048 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002049 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002050
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002051 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002052 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002053
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002054 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2055 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002056 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002057 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2058 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2059 if (Invert)
2060 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002061 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002062 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002063 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002064 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2065 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002066 }
2067
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002068 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2069 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002070 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002071 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2072
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002073 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002074 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2075 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002076
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002077 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002078 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002079 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2080 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2081 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2082 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2083 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2084 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2085
2086 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2087 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2088 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002089
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002090 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002091 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2092 // destinations were inverted.
2093 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002094 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002095 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002096 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002097 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002098 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2099 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002100 }
2101
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002102 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2103 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2104 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2105 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2106 I->eraseFromParent();
2107
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002108 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002109 return true;
2110}
2111
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002112/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002113static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2114 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002115 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002116
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002117 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002118 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2119 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002120 if (Size > 10)
2121 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002122 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002123
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002124 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002125 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002126 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2127 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002128 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2129 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002130 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002131
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002132 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2133 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002134
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002135 return true;
2136}
2137
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002138/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2139/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2140/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002141static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2142 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002143 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2144 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002145 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2146 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002147 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2148 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002149
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002150 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2151 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002152 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002153 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002154 }
2155
2156 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002157 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2158 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002159
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002160 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002161 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002162 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2163 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2164 }))
2165 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002166
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002167 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2168 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002169 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002170 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002171 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2172 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002173
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002174 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2175 // branch to RealDest.
2176 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2177 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002178
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002179 if (RealDest == BB)
2180 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002181 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002182 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2183 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002184
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002185 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2186 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2187 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2188 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002189 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2190 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2191 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002192 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002193
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002194 // Update PHI nodes.
2195 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002196
2197 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2198 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2199 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2200 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002201 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002202 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2203 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2204 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2205 continue;
2206 }
2207 // Clone the instruction.
2208 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002209 if (BBI->hasName())
2210 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002211
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002212 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002213 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2214 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002215 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2216 *i = PI->second;
2217 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002218
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002219 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002220 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002221 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2222 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2223 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002224 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002225 N = nullptr;
2226 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002227 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002228 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002229 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002230 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002231 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2232 if (N)
2233 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002234
2235 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2236 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2237 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2238 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002239 }
2240
2241 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2242 // to EdgeBB instead.
2243 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2244 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2245 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2246 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2247 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2248 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002249
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002250 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002251 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002252 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002253
2254 return false;
2255}
2256
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002257/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2258/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002259static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2260 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002261 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2262 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2263 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2264 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2265 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2266 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002267 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2268 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2269 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002270 if (!IfCond ||
2271 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2272 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2273 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002274
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002275 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2276 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2277 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2278 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2279 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2280 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2281 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2282 if (NumPhis > 2)
2283 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002284
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002285 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2286 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2287 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002288 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002289 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2290 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002291 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2292 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002293
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002294 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2295 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002296 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002297 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002298 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002299 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002300 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002301
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002302 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002303 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002304 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002305 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002306 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002307 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002308
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002309 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002310 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2311 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002312 if (!PN)
2313 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002314
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002315 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2316 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2317 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2318 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2319 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2320 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2321 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002322
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002323 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2324 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2325 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2326 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002327 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002328 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2329 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2330 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002331 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002332 } else {
2333 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002334 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2335 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002336 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002337 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002338 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2339 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002340 return false;
2341 }
2342 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002343
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002344 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002345 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002346 } else {
2347 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002348 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2349 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002350 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002351 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002352 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2353 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002354 return false;
2355 }
2356 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002357
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002358 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002359 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002360
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002361 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2362 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002363 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002364 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002365
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002366 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2367 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002368 if (IfBlock1) {
2369 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2370 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002371 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002372 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002373 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002374 }
2375 if (IfBlock2) {
2376 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2377 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002378 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002379 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002380 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002381 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002382
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002383 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2384 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002385 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002386 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002387
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002388 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2389 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2390 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002391 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002392 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002394 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2395 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2396 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2397 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002398 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2399 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002400 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002401 return true;
2402}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002403
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002404/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2405/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002406/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002407static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002408 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002409 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2410 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2411 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2412 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2413 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002414
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002415 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2416 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2417 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002418 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002419 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002420 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002421 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002422
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002423 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002424 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2425 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2426 // branch into a return.
2427 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2428 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2429 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002430 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002431 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002432 return true;
2433 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002434
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002435 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2436 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2437 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2438 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002439
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002440 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2441 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2442 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2443 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2444 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2445 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2446 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002447
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002448 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2449 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2450 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2451 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2452 // safe.
2453 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2454 if (TCV->canTrap())
2455 return false;
2456 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2457 if (FCV->canTrap())
2458 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002459
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002460 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2461 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2462 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2463 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002464
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002465 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2466 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002467 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002468 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002469 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2470 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2471 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2472 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002473 TrueValue =
2474 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002475 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002476 }
2477
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002478 Value *RI =
2479 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002480
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002481 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002482
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002483 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002484 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002485 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002486
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002487 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2488
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002489 return true;
2490}
2491
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002492/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002493/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002494static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002495 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2496 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002497 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2498 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002499 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2500 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2501 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2502 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2503 return true;
2504 }
2505 }
2506 return false;
2507}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002508
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002509/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2510/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2511/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2512static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2513 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2514 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2515 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2516 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2517 bool PredHasWeights =
2518 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2519 bool SuccHasWeights =
2520 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2521 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2522 if (!PredHasWeights)
2523 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2524 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2525 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2526 return true;
2527 } else {
2528 return false;
2529 }
2530}
2531
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002532/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2533/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2534/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002535bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002536 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002537
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002538 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002539 if (BI->isConditional())
2540 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2541 else {
2542 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2543 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002544 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002545 // predecessor.
2546 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2547 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2548 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2549 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2550 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002551 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002552 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002553 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2554 Cond = Curr;
2555 break;
2556 }
2557 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2558 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2559 return false;
2560 }
2561 }
2562
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002563 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002564 return false;
2565 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002566
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002567 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2568 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002569 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002570
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002571 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002572 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002573
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002574 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002575 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2576 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002577
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002578 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002579 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002580
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002581 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2582 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2583 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2584 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2585 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2586 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002587 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002588 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2589 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2590 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002591 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002592 return false;
2593 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2594 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2595 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2596 return false;
2597 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2598 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2599 // and Cond.
2600 ++NumBonusInsts;
2601 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2602 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2603 return false;
2604 }
2605
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002606 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2607 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2608 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2609 if (CE->canTrap())
2610 return false;
2611 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2612 if (CE->canTrap())
2613 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002614
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002615 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002616 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002617 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002618 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2619 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002620
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002621 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2622 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002623 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002624
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002625 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2626 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2627 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002628 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002629 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002630 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002631 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2632 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002633 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002634
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002635 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002636 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002637 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002638
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002639 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002640 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002641 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002642 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002643 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002644 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2645 Opc = Instruction::And;
2646 InvertPredCond = true;
2647 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2648 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2649 InvertPredCond = true;
2650 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002651 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002652 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002653 } else {
2654 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2655 continue;
2656 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002657
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002658 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002659 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002660
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002661 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2662 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002663 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002664
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002665 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2666 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2667 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2668 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002669 NewCond =
2670 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002671 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002672
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002673 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002674 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002675 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002676
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002677 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002678 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002679 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2680 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2681 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002682 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002683 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002684 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002685 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2686 continue;
2687 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2688 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002689 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002690 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002691
2692 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2693 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2694 // only given the branch precondition.
2695 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2696 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002697 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002698
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002699 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2700 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002701 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002702 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002703
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002704 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2705 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002706 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002707 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002708 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002709 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002710 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002711 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002712
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002713 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002714 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2715 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002716 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2717
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002718 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002719 bool HasWeights =
2720 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2721 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002722 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2723
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002724 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002725 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002726 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2727 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002728 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002729 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002730 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002731 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2732 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2733 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002734 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2735 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2736 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002737 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002738 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2739 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2740 }
2741 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002742 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002743 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2744 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002745 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002746 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002747 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2748 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2749 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2750 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002751 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2752 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002753 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2754 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2755 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002756 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2757 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2758 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2759
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002760 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2761 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002762 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002763 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002764 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002765 } else {
2766 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2767 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002768 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002769 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002770 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002771 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002772 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2773 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2774 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2775 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002776 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2777 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2778 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2779 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002780 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002781 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2782 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002783 } else {
2784 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2785 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2786 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002787 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2788 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002789 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002790 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2791 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2792 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2793 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002794 }
2795 }
2796 // Update PHI Node.
2797 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2798 MergedCond);
2799 }
2800 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2801 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2802 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2803 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002804 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002805
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002806 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2807 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2808 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2809 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2810
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002811 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2812 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2813
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002814 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002815 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2816 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2817 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002818
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002819 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002820 }
2821 return false;
2822}
2823
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002824// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2825// nullptr.
2826static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2827 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2828 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2829 if (!BB)
2830 continue;
2831 for (auto &I : *BB)
2832 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2833 if (S)
2834 // Multiple stores seen.
2835 return nullptr;
2836 else
2837 S = SI;
2838 }
2839 }
2840 return S;
2841}
2842
2843static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2844 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2845 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2846 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2847 //
2848 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2849 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2850 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2851 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2852 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2853 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2854 // one.
2855 //
2856 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2857 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2858 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2859 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2860 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002861
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002862 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2863 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2864 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2865 if (!AlternativeV)
2866 break;
2867
2868 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2869 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2870 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2871 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2872 break;
2873 PHI = nullptr;
2874 }
2875 if (PHI)
2876 return PHI;
2877
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002878 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2879 if (!AlternativeV &&
2880 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2881 return V;
2882
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002883 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002884 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2885 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2886 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002887 PHI->addIncoming(
2888 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002889 return PHI;
2890}
2891
2892static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2893 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2894 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002895 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2896 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002897 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2898 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2899 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2900 };
2901
2902 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2903 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2904 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2905 if (!BB)
2906 return true;
2907 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2908 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2909 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002910 unsigned N = 0;
2911 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2912 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2913 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2914 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2915 ++N;
2916 // Free instructions.
2917 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2918 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2919 continue;
2920 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002921 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002922 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002923 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2924 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2925 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002926 };
2927
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002928 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2929 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2930 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002931 return false;
2932
2933 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2934 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2935 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2936 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2937 // testing.
2938 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2939 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2940 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2941 return false;
2942
2943 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2944 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2945 return false;
2946
2947 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2948 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2949 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2950 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2951 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2952 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2953 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2954 //
2955 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2956 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2957 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2958 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2959 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2960 return false;
2961 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2962 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2963 return false;
2964 if (QTB)
2965 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2966 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2967 return false;
2968 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2969 I != E; ++I)
2970 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2971 return false;
2972
2973 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2974 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2975 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2976 ->getCondition();
2977 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2978 ->getCondition();
2979
2980 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2981 PStore->getParent());
2982 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2983 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2984
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002985 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2986
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002987 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2988 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2989
2990 if (InvertPCond)
2991 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2992 if (InvertQCond)
2993 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2994 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2995
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002996 auto *T =
2997 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002998 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2999 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3000 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3001 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3002 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3003 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003004 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
3005 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
3006 unsigned TypeAlignment =
3007 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
3008 unsigned MinAlignment;
3009 unsigned MaxAlignment;
3010 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
3011 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3012 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3013 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3014 // store that doesn't execute.
3015 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3016 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3017 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3018 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3019 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3020 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3021 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3022 } else {
3023 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3024 // the stored value.
3025 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3026 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003027
3028 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3029 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003030
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003031 return true;
3032}
3033
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003034static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3035 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003036 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3037 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3038 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3039 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3040 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3041 // PBI and QBI.
3042 //
3043 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3044 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3045 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3046 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3047 //
3048 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3049 //
3050 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3051 // / \ | \
3052 // PTB PFB | PFB
3053 // \ / | /
3054 // QBI QBI
3055 // / \ | \
3056 // QTB QFB | QFB
3057 // \ / | /
3058 // PostBB PostBB
3059 //
3060 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3061 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3062 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003063 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3064 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3065 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3066 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3067 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3068
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003069 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3070 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3071 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3072 PostBB = QFB;
3073
3074 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3075 if (!PostBB)
3076 return false;
3077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003078 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3079 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3080 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3081 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3082 InvertPCond = true;
3083 }
3084 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3085 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3086 InvertQCond = true;
3087 }
3088
3089 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3090 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3091 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3092 PTB = nullptr;
3093 if (QTB == PostBB)
3094 QTB = nullptr;
3095
3096 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3097 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3098 // predecessor.
3099 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003100 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003101 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003102 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003103 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3104 return false;
3105 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3106 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3107 return false;
Craig Topperc2280682017-04-17 22:13:00 +00003108 if (!PostBB->hasNUses(2) || !QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003109 return false;
3110
3111 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3112 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003113 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003114 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3115 if (!BB)
3116 continue;
3117 for (auto &I : *BB)
3118 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3119 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3120 }
3121 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3122 if (!BB)
3123 continue;
3124 for (auto &I : *BB)
3125 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3126 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3127 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003128
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003129 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3130 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3131 // clear what it contains.
3132 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3133
3134 bool Changed = false;
3135 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3136 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003137 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003138 return Changed;
3139}
3140
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003141/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3142/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003143/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3144/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003145static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3146 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003147 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3148 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003149
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003150 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003151 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003152 // this conditional branch redundant.
3153 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3154 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3155 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3156 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3157 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3158 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3159 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003160 BI->setCondition(
3161 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3162 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003163 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003164
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003165 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3166 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3167 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3168 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003169 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003170 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3171 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3172 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003173 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3174 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3175 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003176 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003177 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003178 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3179 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003180 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3181 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003182 NewPN->addIncoming(
3183 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3184 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003185 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003186 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003187 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003188 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003189
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003190 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003191 return true;
3192 }
3193 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003194
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003195 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3196 if (CE->canTrap())
3197 return false;
3198
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003199 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3200 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3201 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003202 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003203 return true;
3204
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003205 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003206 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003207 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003208 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3209 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3210 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3211 ++BBI;
3212 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003213 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003214
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003215 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003216 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3217 PBIOp = 0;
3218 BIOp = 0;
3219 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3220 PBIOp = 0;
3221 BIOp = 1;
3222 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3223 PBIOp = 1;
3224 BIOp = 0;
3225 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3226 PBIOp = 1;
3227 BIOp = 1;
3228 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003229 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003230 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003231
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003232 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3233 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3234 // keep getting unwound.
3235 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3236 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003237
3238 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003239 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3240 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003241
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003242 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3243 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3244 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3245
3246 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003247 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003248 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3249 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003250 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3251 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003252
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003253 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3254 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3255 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3256 if (CE->canTrap())
3257 return false;
3258
3259 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3260 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3261 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3262 if (CE->canTrap())
3263 return false;
3264 }
3265
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003266 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003267 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003268
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003269 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003270 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003271
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003272 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3273 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3274 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3275 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3276 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3277 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3278 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3279 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3280 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3281 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003282 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3283 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003284 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3285 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003286 }
3287
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003288 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003289
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003290 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3291 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003292
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003293 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3294 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003295 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003296 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003297 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003298
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003299 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3300 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003301 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003302
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003303 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003304 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003305
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003306 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3307 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3308 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3309 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003310
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003311 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3312 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003313 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003314 bool HasWeights =
3315 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3316 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003317 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003318 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3319 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3320 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3321 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003322 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3323 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3324 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003325 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3326 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3327 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003328 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003329 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3330
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003331 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003332 }
3333
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003334 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3335 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003336 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003337
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003338 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3339 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3340 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3341 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003342 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003343 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3344 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3345 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3346 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3347 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3348 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3349 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003350 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3351 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003352 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003353 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3354 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3355 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3356 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003357 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003358 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3359 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3360 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3361 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3362 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3363 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3364 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3365 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3366
3367 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3368
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003369 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003370 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003371 }
3372 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003373
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003374 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3375 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003376
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003377 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3378 // one fewer predecessor.
3379 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003380}
3381
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003382// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3383// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003384// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3385// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3386// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3387static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003388 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3389 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003390 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003391 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3392 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3393 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3394 // successor.
3395 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003396 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003397
3398 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003399 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003400 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3401 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003402 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003403 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003404 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003405 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003406 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3407 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003408 }
3409
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003410 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3411 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3412
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003413 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003414 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003415 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3416 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3417 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003418 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003419 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003420 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3421 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003422 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3423 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003424 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003425 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003426 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3427 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3428 // terminator must be unreachable.
3429 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3430 } else {
3431 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3432 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3433 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003434 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003435 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003436 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003437 else
3438 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003439 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003440 }
3441
3442 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3443 return true;
3444}
3445
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003446// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003447// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3448// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3449// unconditional otherwise.
3450static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3451 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3452 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3453 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3454 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3455 return false;
3456
3457 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3458 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003459 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3460 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003461
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003462 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3463 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3464 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3465 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3466 if (HasWeights) {
3467 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3468 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003469 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003470 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003471 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003472 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003473 }
3474 }
3475
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003476 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003477 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3478 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003479}
3480
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003481// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003482// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3483// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3484// with
3485// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3486static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3487 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3488 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3489 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3490 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3491 return false;
3492
3493 // Extract the actual blocks.
3494 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3495 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3496
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003497 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003498 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3499 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003500}
3501
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003502/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3503/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003504/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3505/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3506/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3507/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3508/// like:
3509///
3510/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3511/// DEFAULT:
3512/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3513/// br label %end
3514/// end:
3515/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003516///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003517/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3518/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003519static bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003520 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003521 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003522 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003523
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003524 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3525 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003526 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3527 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003528
3529 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3530 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003531
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003532 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3533 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3534 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3535 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003536 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3537 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003538
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003539 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3540 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3541 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003542
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003543 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3544 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3545 // away.
3546 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3547 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3548 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3549 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003550
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003551 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003552 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003553 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3554 }
3555 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003556 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003557 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003558
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003559 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3560 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3561 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003562 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003563 Value *V;
3564 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3565 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3566 else
3567 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003568
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003569 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3570 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3571 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003572 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003573 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003574
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003575 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3576 // the block.
3577 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003578 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003579 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003580 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3581 return false;
3582
3583 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3584 // true in the PHI.
3585 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003586 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003587
3588 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3589 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3590
3591 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3592 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3593 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3594 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3595
3596 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3597 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003598 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3599 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003600 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3601 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3602 if (HasWeights) {
3603 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3604 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3605 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003606 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003607 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3608
3609 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003610 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003611 }
3612 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003613 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003614
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003615 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003616 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3617 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3618 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003619 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3620 return true;
3621}
3622
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003623/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003624/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3625/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003626static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3627 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003628 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003629 if (!Cond)
3630 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003631
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003632 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3633 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3634 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003635
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003636 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003637 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3638 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003639 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003640 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3641 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3642 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003643
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003644 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003645 if (!CompVal)
3646 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003647
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003648 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3649 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3650 return false;
3651
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003652 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3653
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003654 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3655 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3656 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3657 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003658
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003659 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003660 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003661 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3662 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003663
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003664 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3665 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3666
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003667 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3668 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003669 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3670 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3671 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003672
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003673 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003674
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003675 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003676 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3677 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003678
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003679 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3680 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3681 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3682 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003683 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3684 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003685 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3686 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003687 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3688
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003689 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003690 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003691 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003692 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003693
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003694 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003695
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003696 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3697 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003698 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003699
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003700 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003701 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003702 BB = NewBB;
3703 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003704
3705 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003706 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3707 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003708 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3709 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003710 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003711
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003712 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003713 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003714
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003715 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3716 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3717 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003718
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003719 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3720 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3721 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003722 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003723 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3724 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003725 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003726 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3727 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003728
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003729 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3730 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003731
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003732 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003733 return true;
3734}
3735
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003736bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003737 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3738 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3739 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3740 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3741 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3742 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003743
3744 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003745}
3746
3747// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3748bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3749 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3750
3751 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3752 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3753 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003754 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003755 while (++I != E)
3756 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3757 return false;
3758
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003759 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003760 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3761
3762 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003763 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3764 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003765 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3766 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3767
3768 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3769 // it has other dependents.
3770 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3771 continue;
3772
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003773 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003774 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3775 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3776 continue;
3777
3778 bool isTrivial = true;
3779
3780 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3781 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3782 while (++I != E)
3783 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3784 isTrivial = false;
3785 break;
3786 }
3787
3788 if (isTrivial)
3789 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3790 }
3791
3792 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003793 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3794 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003795
3796 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3797 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3798 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3799 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3800 // to remove them all.
3801 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3802 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3803
3804 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3805 PI != PE;) {
3806 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3807 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3808 }
3809
3810 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3811 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3812 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3813 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3814 // predecessors.
3815 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3816 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3817 }
3818
3819 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3820 if (pred_empty(BB))
3821 BB->eraseFromParent();
3822
3823 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3824}
3825
3826// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3827bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003828 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3829 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003830 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3831 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003832
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003833 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3834 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003835 while (++I != E)
3836 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3837 return false;
3838
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003839 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003840 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3841 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3842 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003843 }
3844
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003845 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3846 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003847 if (LoopHeaders)
3848 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003849 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003850}
3851
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003852static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003853 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3854 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3855 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3856 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3857 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3858 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3859 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3860 // simplified.
3861 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003862 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3863 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003864 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3865 return false;
3866
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003867 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3868 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3869 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3870 return false;
3871
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003872 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003873 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003874 while (++I != E) {
3875 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3876 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003877 return false;
3878
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003879 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3880 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3881 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3882 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3883 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3884 break;
3885 default:
3886 return false;
3887 }
3888 }
3889
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003890 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3891 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003892 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003893 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003894
3895 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3896 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3897 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3898 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3899 // are both EH pads).
3900 if (UnwindDest) {
3901 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3902 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003903 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003904 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003905 I != IE; ++I) {
3906 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003907
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003908 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003909 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003910 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003911 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3912 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3913 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3914 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3915 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3916 // pad being removed.
3917 //
3918 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3919 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3920 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3921 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3922 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3923 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3924
3925 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3926 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3927
3928 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3929 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3930 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3931 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003932 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003933 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003934 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3935 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3936 }
3937 } else {
3938 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3939 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3940 // predecessors with this value.
3941 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3942 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3943 }
3944 }
3945 }
3946
3947 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003948 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003949 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3950 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003951 I != IE;) {
3952 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3953 // being moved to another block.
3954 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3955 if (PN->use_empty())
3956 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3957 // when we erase BB below.
3958 continue;
3959
3960 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3961 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3962 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3963 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3964 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3965 if (pred != BB)
3966 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3967 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3968 }
3969 }
3970
3971 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3972 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3973 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003974 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003975 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003976 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003977 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003978 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003979 }
3980 }
3981
3982 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3983 BB->eraseFromParent();
3984 return true;
3985}
3986
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003987// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3988static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3989 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3990 // with.
3991 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3992 if (!UnwindDest)
3993 return false;
3994
3995 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3996 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3997 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3998 return false;
3999
4000 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4001 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4002 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4003 return false;
4004
4005 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4006 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4007 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4008 // funclet bundle operands.
4009 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4010 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4011 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4012 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4013 // destination.
4014 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4015 RI->eraseFromParent();
4016
4017 return true;
4018}
4019
4020bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004021 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4022 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4023 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4024 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4025 return false;
4026
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004027 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004028 return true;
4029
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004030 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004031 return true;
4032
4033 return false;
4034}
4035
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004036bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004037 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004038 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4039 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004040
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004041 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004042 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4043 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004044 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4045 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004046 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4047 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4048 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4049 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4050 else
4051 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4052 }
4053 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004054
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004055 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004056 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004057 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4058 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4059 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004060 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004061 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004062 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004063
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004064 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004065 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004066 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4067 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004068 if (LoopHeaders)
4069 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004070 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004071
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004072 return true;
4073 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004074
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004075 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4076 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4077 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4078 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4079 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004080
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004081 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4082 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4083 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004084 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004085 return true;
4086 }
4087 return false;
4088}
4089
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004090bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4091 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004092
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004093 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004094
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004095 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4096 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004097 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4098 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004099 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004100 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4101 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4102 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004103 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4104 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004105
4106 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004107 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004108 if (SI->isVolatile())
4109 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004110 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004111 if (LI->isVolatile())
4112 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004113 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004114 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4115 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004116 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004117 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4118 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004119 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4120 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4121 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4122 // default.
4123 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4124 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4125 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4126 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004127 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4128 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004129 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004130 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004131 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4132 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4133 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4134 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004135 }
4136
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004137 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4138 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4139 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004140 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004141 Changed = true;
4142 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004143
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004144 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4145 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004146 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4147 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004148
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004149 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004150 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4151 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004152 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004153 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004154 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4155 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4156 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4157 TI->eraseFromParent();
4158 Changed = true;
4159 }
4160 } else {
4161 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004162 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004163 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4164 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004165 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004166 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4167 Changed = true;
4168 }
4169 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004170 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004171 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004172 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004173 ++i;
4174 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004175 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004176 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4177 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4178 e = SI->case_end();
4179 Changed = true;
4180 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004181 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4182 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4183 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4184 Changed = true;
4185 }
4186 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4187 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4188 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4189 Changed = true;
4190 continue;
4191 }
4192
4193 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4194 E = CSI->handler_end();
4195 I != E; ++I) {
4196 if (*I == BB) {
4197 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4198 --I;
4199 --E;
4200 Changed = true;
4201 }
4202 }
4203 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4204 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4205 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4206 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4207 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4208 } else {
4209 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4210 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4211 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4212 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4213 }
4214 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4215 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4216 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4217 Changed = true;
4218 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004219 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004220 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4221 TI->eraseFromParent();
4222 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004223 }
4224 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004225
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004226 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004227 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004228 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4229 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004230 if (LoopHeaders)
4231 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004232 return true;
4233 }
4234
4235 return Changed;
4236}
4237
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004238static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4239 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4240
4241 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4242 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4243 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4244 return false;
4245 }
4246 return true;
4247}
4248
4249/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4250/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004251static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004252 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004253
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004254 bool HasDefault =
4255 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004256
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004257 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4258 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4259 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004260 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4261 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004262
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004263 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4264 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004265 if (!DestA)
4266 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004267 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004268 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004269 continue;
4270 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004271 if (!DestB)
4272 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004273 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004274 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004275 continue;
4276 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004277 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004278 }
4279
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004280 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4281 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004282 assert(DestA != DestB);
4283 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4284 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4285 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4286
4287 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4288 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4289 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4290 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4291 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4292 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4293 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4294 OtherDest = DestB;
4295 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4296 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4297 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4298 OtherDest = DestA;
4299 } else
4300 return false;
4301
4302 // Start building the compare and branch.
4303
4304 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004305 Constant *NumCases =
4306 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004307
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004308 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4309 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004310 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4311
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004312 Value *Cmp;
4313 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004314 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004315 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4316 else
4317 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004318 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004319
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004320 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004321 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4322 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004323 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4324 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004325 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4326 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4327 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4328 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4329 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4330 else
4331 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4332 }
4333 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4334 TrueWeight /= 2;
4335 FalseWeight /= 2;
4336 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004337 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004338 }
4339 }
4340
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004341 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4342 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4343 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004344 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4345 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004346 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004347 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4348 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004349 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4350 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004351 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4352 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004353 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4354 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4355 }
4356
4357 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004358 SI->eraseFromParent();
4359
4360 return true;
4361}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004362
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004363/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004364/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004365static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004366 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004367 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004368 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004369 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004370
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004371 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4372 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4373 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004374 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004375 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4376
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004377 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004378 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004379 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004380 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004381 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004382 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004383 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004384 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004385 }
4386 }
4387
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004388 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4389 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004390 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4391 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004392 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004393 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4394 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004395 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004396 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004397 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004398 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004399 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004400 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004401 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4402 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004403 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4404 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004405 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4406 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4407 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4408 return true;
4409 }
4410
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004411 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4412 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4413 if (HasWeight) {
4414 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4415 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4416 }
4417
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004418 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004419 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004420 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4421 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004422 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004423 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004424 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004425 Weights.pop_back();
4426 }
4427
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004428 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004429 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4430 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004431 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004432 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004433 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004434 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004435 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004436
4437 return !DeadCases.empty();
4438}
4439
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004440/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4441/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004442/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4443/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4444/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4445static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004446 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004447 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004448 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004449 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004450 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004451
4452 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4453 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004454 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004455
4456 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4457
4458 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4459 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4460 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4461 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4462
4463 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004464 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4465 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004466
4467 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4468 return PHI;
4469 }
4470
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004471 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004472}
4473
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004474/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4475/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004476/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004477static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004478 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4479
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004480 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004481 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4482 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004483 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004484 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4485 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004486
4487 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4488 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4489 // switchbb:
4490 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4491 // i32 17, label %succ
4492 // ...
4493 // succ:
4494 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4495 // -->
4496 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4497
4498 for (Instruction &InstInCaseDest : *CaseDest) {
4499 auto *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&InstInCaseDest);
4500 if (!Phi) break;
4501
4502 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4503 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4504 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4505 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4506 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
4507 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi->getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4508 if (Phi->getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4509 count(Phi->blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4510 Phi->setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
4511 Changed = true;
4512 }
4513 }
4514
4515 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004516 int PhiIdx;
4517 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4518 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004519 }
4520
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004521 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4522 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4523 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004524 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4525 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004526
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004527 for (int Index : Indexes)
4528 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004529 Changed = true;
4530 }
4531
4532 return Changed;
4533}
4534
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004535/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004536/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004537static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004538 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4539 return false;
4540 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4541 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004542
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004543 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4544 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4545 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4546 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004547
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004548 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004549 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4550 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004551 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4552 return false;
4553 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004554
4555 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4556 return false;
4557
4558 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004559}
4560
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004561/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004562/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004563static Constant *
4564LookupConstant(Value *V,
4565 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004566 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4567 return C;
4568 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4569}
4570
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004571/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004572/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4573/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004574/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004575static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004576ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4577 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004578 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004579 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4580 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004581 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004582 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4583 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4584 if (A->isNullValue())
4585 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004586 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004587 }
4588
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004589 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4590 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4591 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4592 COps.push_back(A);
4593 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004594 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004595 }
4596
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004597 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004598 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4599 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004600 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004601
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004602 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004603}
4604
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004605/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004606/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004607/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004608/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004609static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004610GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004611 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004612 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004613 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004614 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4615 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4616
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004617 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4618 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004619 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004620 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4621 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4622 ++I) {
4623 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4624 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004625 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004626 return false;
4627 Pred = CaseDest;
4628 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4629 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4630 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4631 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004632 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004633 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004634
4635 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4636 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4637 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4638 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4639 User *User = Use.getUser();
4640 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4641 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4642 continue;
4643 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4644 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4645 continue;
4646 return false;
4647 }
4648
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004649 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004650 } else {
4651 break;
4652 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004653 }
4654
4655 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4656 if (!*CommonDest)
4657 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4658 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4659 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4660 return false;
4661
4662 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4663 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4664 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4665 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4666 if (Idx == -1)
4667 continue;
4668
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004669 Constant *ConstVal =
4670 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004671 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004672 return false;
4673
4674 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004675 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004676 return false;
4677
4678 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4679 }
4680
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004681 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004682}
4683
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004684// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4685// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004686static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004687 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4688 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004689 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4690 if (I.first == Result) {
4691 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4692 return;
4693 }
4694 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004695 UniqueResults.push_back(
4696 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004697}
4698
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004699// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004700// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4701// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4702// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004703static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4704 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4705 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4706 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004707 const DataLayout &DL,
4708 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004709 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4710 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4711
4712 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4713 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4714 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004715 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004716 return false;
4717
4718 // Only one value per case is permitted
4719 if (Results.size() > 1)
4720 return false;
4721 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4722
4723 // Check the PHI consistency.
4724 if (!PHI)
4725 PHI = Results[0].first;
4726 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4727 return false;
4728 }
4729 // Find the default result value.
4730 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4731 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4732 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004733 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004734 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4735 // is unreachable.
4736 DefaultResult =
4737 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4738 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004739 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004740 return false;
4741
4742 return true;
4743}
4744
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004745// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4746// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004747// Example:
4748// switch (a) {
4749// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4750// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4751// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4752// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4753// default:
4754// return 4;
4755// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004756static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4757 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4758 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004759 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004760 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004761 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4762 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4763 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4764 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4765 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4766 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4767
4768 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4769 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4770 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4771 Value *const ValueCompare =
4772 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4773 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4774 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4775 }
4776 Value *const ValueCompare =
4777 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004778 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4779 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004780 }
4781
4782 return nullptr;
4783}
4784
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004785// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4786// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004787static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4788 Value *SelectValue,
4789 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4790 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4791 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4792 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4793 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4794
4795 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4796
4797 // Remove the switch.
4798 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4799 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4800
4801 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4802 continue;
4803 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4804 }
4805 SI->eraseFromParent();
4806}
4807
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004808/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004809/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4810/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004811static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4812 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004813 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004814 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4815 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4816 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4817 Constant *DefaultResult;
4818 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4819 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004820 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004821 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004822 return false;
4823 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4824 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4825 return false;
4826 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4827
4828 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004829 Value *SelectValue =
4830 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004831 if (SelectValue) {
4832 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4833 return true;
4834 }
4835 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4836 return false;
4837}
4838
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004839namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004840
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004841/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4842class SwitchLookupTable {
4843public:
4844 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4845 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4846 SwitchLookupTable(
4847 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4848 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004849 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004850
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004851 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4852 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4853 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004854
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004855 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4856 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4857 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4858 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004859
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004860private:
4861 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4862 // different ways.
4863 enum {
4864 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4865 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4866 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004867
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004868 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4869 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4870 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4871 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004872
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004873 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4874 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4875 // shift and mask operations.
4876 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004877
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004878 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4879 // instructions from the table.
4880 ArrayKind
4881 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004882
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004883 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004884 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004885
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004886 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004887 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4888 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004889
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004890 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004891 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4892 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004893
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004894 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004895 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004896};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004897
4898} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004899
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004900SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4901 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4902 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004903 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004904 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4905 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004906
4907 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004908 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004909
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004910 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4911
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004912 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004913 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004914 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4915 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4916 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004917 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004918
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004919 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004920 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4921
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004922 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004923 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004924 }
4925
4926 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004927 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004928 assert(DefaultValue &&
4929 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004930 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004931 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4932 if (!TableContents[I])
4933 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004934 }
4935
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004936 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004937 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004938 }
4939
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004940 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4941 // that single value.
4942 if (SingleValue) {
4943 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4944 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004945 }
4946
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004947 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4948 // table index.
4949 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4950 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4951 APInt PrevVal;
4952 APInt DistToPrev;
4953 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4954 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4955 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4956 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4957 if (!ConstVal) {
4958 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4959 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4960 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4961 break;
4962 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004963 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004964 if (I != 0) {
4965 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4966 if (I == 1) {
4967 DistToPrev = Dist;
4968 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4969 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4970 break;
4971 }
4972 }
4973 PrevVal = Val;
4974 }
4975 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4976 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4977 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4978 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4979 ++NumLinearMaps;
4980 return;
4981 }
4982 }
4983
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004984 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004985 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004986 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004987 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4988 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4989 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004990 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4991 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4992 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4993 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4994 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004995 }
4996 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4997 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4998 Kind = BitMapKind;
4999 ++NumBitMaps;
5000 return;
5001 }
5002
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005003 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005004 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005005 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5006
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005007 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
5008 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005009 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00005010 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005011 Kind = ArrayKind;
5012}
5013
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005014Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005015 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005016 case SingleValueKind:
5017 return SingleValue;
5018 case LinearMapKind: {
5019 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5020 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5021 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5022 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5023 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5024 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5025 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5026 return Result;
5027 }
5028 case BitMapKind: {
5029 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5030 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005031
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005032 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5033 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5034 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5035 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005036
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005037 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5038 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5039 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5040 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005041
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005042 // Shift down.
5043 Value *DownShifted =
5044 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5045 // Mask off.
5046 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5047 }
5048 case ArrayKind: {
5049 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5050 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5051 uint64_t TableSize =
5052 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5053 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5054 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5055 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5056 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005057
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005058 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5059 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5060 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5061 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5062 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005063 }
5064 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5065}
5066
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005067bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005068 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005069 Type *ElementType) {
5070 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005071 if (!IT)
5072 return false;
5073 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5074 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005075
5076 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005077 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005078 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005079 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005080}
5081
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005082/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5083/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005084static bool
5085ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5086 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5087 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005088 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5089 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005090
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005091 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005092 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005093 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5094 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005095
5096 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005097 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005098
5099 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005100 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5101 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5102 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005103
5104 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5105 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5106 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5107 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005108 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005109 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005110
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005111 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5112 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5113 return true;
5114
5115 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5116 if (HasIllegalType)
5117 return false;
5118
5119 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5120 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5121 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5122 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005123}
5124
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005125/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5126/// \code
5127/// if (idx < tablesize)
5128/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5129/// else
5130/// r = default_value;
5131/// if (r != default_value)
5132/// ...
5133/// \endcode
5134/// Is optimized to:
5135/// \code
5136/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5137/// if (cond)
5138/// r = table[idx];
5139/// else
5140/// r = default_value;
5141/// if (cond)
5142/// ...
5143/// \endcode
5144/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005145static void reuseTableCompare(
5146 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5147 Constant *DefaultValue,
5148 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005149 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5150 if (!CmpInst)
5151 return;
5152
5153 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5154 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5155 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5156 return;
5157
5158 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5159 if (!CmpOp1)
5160 return;
5161
5162 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5163 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5164 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5165
5166 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5167 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5168 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5169 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5170 return;
5171
5172 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5173 // compare result.
5174 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5175 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005176 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005177 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5178 return;
5179 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5180 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5181 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005182
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005183 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5184 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5185 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5186 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5187 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5188 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5189 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5190 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5191 return;
5192 }
5193
5194 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5195 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5196 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5197 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5198 } else {
5199 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005200 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5201 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5202 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005203 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5204 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5205 }
5206}
5207
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005208/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5209/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5210/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005211static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5212 const DataLayout &DL,
5213 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005214 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005215
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005216 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5217 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5218 // attribute is not set.
5219 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5220 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005221 return false;
5222
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005223 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5224 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5225
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005226 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5227 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5228 // string and lookup indices into that.
5229
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005230 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005231 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005232 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005233 return false;
5234
5235 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005236 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005237 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5238 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005239 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5240 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005241
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005242 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005243
5244 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005245 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005246
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005247 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5248 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5249 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005250
5251 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005252 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005253 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5254 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5255 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5256 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5257
5258 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005259 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005260 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005261 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005262 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005263 return false;
5264
5265 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005266 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5267 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5268 Constant *Value = I.second;
5269 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5270 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5271 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005272 }
5273 }
5274
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005275 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005276 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005277 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5278 }
5279
5280 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5281 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5282 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5283 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5284
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005285 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5286 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005287 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005288 bool HasDefaultResults =
5289 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5290 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005291
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005292 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5293 if (NeedMask) {
5294 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005295 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005296 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005297 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005298 return false;
5299 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005300
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005301 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5302 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5303 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005304 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005305 }
5306
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005307 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005308 return false;
5309
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005310 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005311 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005312 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5313 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005314
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005315 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005316 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005317 Value *TableIndex;
5318 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5319 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5320 else
5321 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5322 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005323
5324 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5325 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005326 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005327 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005328 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5329 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5330 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5331
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005332 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5333 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5334 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5335 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5336 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5337 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005338 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5339
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005340 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005341 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005342 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5343 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005344 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005345 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5346 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5347 RangeCheckBranch =
5348 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005349 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005350
5351 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5352 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005353
5354 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005355 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5356 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005357 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5358 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005359 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5360 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005361
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005362 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005363 // unnecessary illegal types.
5364 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5365 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5366 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005367 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005368 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5369 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005370 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5371 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005372 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5373 }
5374 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5375
5376 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5377 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5378 // else continue with table lookup.
5379 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005380 Value *MaskIndex =
5381 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5382 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5383 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5384 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005385 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5386
5387 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5388 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5389 }
5390
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005391 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005392 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005393 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5394 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5395 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5396 }
5397
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005398 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005399 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5400 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005401 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005402
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005403 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5404 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005405 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005406 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5407 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005408
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005409 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005410
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005411 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5412 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005413 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5414 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005415 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5416 ReturnedEarly = true;
5417 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005418 }
5419
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005420 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5421 // possible.
5422 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5423 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5424 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5425 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5426 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5427 }
5428 }
5429
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005430 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005431 }
5432
5433 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5434 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5435
5436 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005437 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005438 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005439
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005440 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005441 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005442 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5443 }
5444 SI->eraseFromParent();
5445
5446 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005447 if (NeedMask)
5448 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005449 return true;
5450}
5451
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005452static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5453 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5454 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5455 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5456 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5457 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5458 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005459
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005460 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5461}
5462
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005463/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5464/// of cases.
5465///
5466/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5467/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5468///
5469/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5470/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005471static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5472 const DataLayout &DL,
5473 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5474 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5475 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5476 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5477 return false;
5478 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5479 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5480 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5481 return false;
5482
5483 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5484 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5485 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5486 // as signed.
5487 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5488 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5489 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5490 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5491
5492 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5493 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5494 return false;
5495
5496 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5497 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5498 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005499 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005500
5501 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5502 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5503 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5504 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5505 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005506 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005507
5508 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5509 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5510 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5511 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5512 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5513 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5514 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5515 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005516 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005517 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5518 return false;
5519
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005520 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005521 for (auto &V : Values)
5522 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5523
5524 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5525 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5526 return false;
5527
5528 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5529 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5530 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5531 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5532 //
5533 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5534 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5535 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5536 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005537
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005538 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5539 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5540 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5541 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005542 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5543 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5544 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005545 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5546
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005547 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5548 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005549 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005550 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005551 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005552 }
5553 return true;
5554}
5555
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005556bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005557 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5558
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005559 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5560 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5561 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5562 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5563 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005564 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005565
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005566 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5567 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5568 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005569 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005570
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005571 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5572 // away into any preds.
5573 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5574 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5575 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5576 ++BBI;
5577 if (SI == &*BBI)
5578 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005579 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005580 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005581
5582 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005583 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005584 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005585
5586 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005587 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
5588 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005589
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005590 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5591 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005592
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005593 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005594 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005595
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005596 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5597 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5598 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5599 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5600 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005601 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5602 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005603 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005604
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005605 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005606 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005607
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005608 return false;
5609}
5610
5611bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5612 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5613 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005614
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005615 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5616 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5617 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5618 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005619 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005620 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5621 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005622 --i;
5623 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005624 Changed = true;
5625 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005626 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005627
5628 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5629 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5630 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5631 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5632 return true;
5633 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005634
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005635 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5636 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5637 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5638 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5639 return true;
5640 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005641
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005642 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5643 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005644 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005645 }
5646 return Changed;
5647}
5648
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005649/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5650/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5651/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5652/// a shared handler.
5653///
5654/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5655/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5656/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5657/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5658/// sinking in this file)
5659///
5660/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5661/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5662/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5663/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5664/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5665/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5666///
5667/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5668/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5669/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5670static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5671 BasicBlock *BB) {
5672 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5673 assert(Succ);
5674 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5675 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5676 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5677 return false;
5678
5679 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5680 if (BB == OtherPred)
5681 continue;
5682 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5683 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5684 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5685 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005686 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5687 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005688 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5689 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5690 continue;
5691
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005692 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005693 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5694 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5695 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5696 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5697 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005698 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5699 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005700 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5701 }
5702
5703 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5704 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005705 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5706 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5707 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005708 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5709 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5710 }
5711
5712 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5713 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5714 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5715 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5716 }
5717
5718 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5719 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5720 BI->eraseFromParent();
5721 return true;
5722 }
5723 return false;
5724}
5725
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005726bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5727 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005728 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005729 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005730
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005731 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5732 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005733
5734 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005735 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5736 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005737 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5738 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
5739 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005740 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005741 (LoopHeaders && (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005742 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005743 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005744 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005745 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005746
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005747 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5748 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005749 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5750 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5751 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5752 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005753 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005754 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI, Options))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005755 return true;
5756 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005757
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005758 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5759 // equivalent.
5760 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005761 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5762 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005763 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005764 return true;
5765 }
5766
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005767 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5768 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5769 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5770 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005771 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005772 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005773 return false;
5774}
5775
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005776static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5777 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5778 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5779 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5780 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5781 return nullptr;
5782 PredPred = PPred;
5783 }
5784 return PredPred;
5785}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005786
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005787bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005788 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005789
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005790 // Conditional branch
5791 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5792 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5793 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5794 // switch.
5795 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005796 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005797 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005798
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005799 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5800 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5801 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5802 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5803 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5804 ++I;
5805 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005806 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005807 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005808 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005809 ++I;
5810 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5811 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5812 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005813 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005814 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005815 }
5816 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005817
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005818 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005819 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005820 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005821
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005822 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5823 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5824 // of the BI branch.
5825 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5826 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5827 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
Craig Topperdfd01ea2017-07-06 16:29:43 +00005828 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
5829 assert(PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB);
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005830 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005831 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005832 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsTrue);
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005833 if (Implication) {
5834 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5835 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5836 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5837 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5838 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5839 BI->setCondition(CI);
5840 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005841 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005842 }
5843 }
5844 }
5845
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005846 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5847 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5848 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005849 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005850 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005851
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005852 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5853 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5854 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5855 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005856 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5857 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005858 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005859 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005860 } else {
5861 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005862 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005863 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5864 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5865 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005866 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005867 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005868 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005869 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005870 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005871 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005872 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5873 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5874 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005875 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005876 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005877 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005878
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005879 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5880 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5881 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5882 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005883 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
5884 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005885
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005886 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005887 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5888 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005889 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005890 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005891 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005892
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005893 // Look for diamond patterns.
5894 if (MergeCondStores)
5895 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5896 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5897 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005898 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005899 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005900
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005901 return false;
5902}
5903
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005904/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5905static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5906 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5907 if (!C)
5908 return false;
5909
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005910 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005911 return false;
5912
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005913 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005914 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005915 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005916
5917 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5918 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005919 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5920 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5921 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5922 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005923 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005924 return false;
5925
5926 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5927 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5928 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5929 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5930
5931 // Look through bitcasts.
5932 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5933 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5934
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005935 // Load from null is undefined.
5936 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005937 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5938 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005939
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005940 // Store to null is undefined.
5941 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005942 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005943 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5944 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005945
5946 // A call to null is undefined.
5947 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5948 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005949 }
5950 return false;
5951}
5952
5953/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005954/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005955static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5956 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5957 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5958 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5959 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5960 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5961 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5962 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5963 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5964 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5965 // destination from conditional branches.
5966 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5967 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5968 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005969 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5970 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005971 BI->eraseFromParent();
5972 return true;
5973 }
5974 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5975 }
5976
5977 return false;
5978}
5979
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005980bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005981 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005982
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005983 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005984 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005985
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005986 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5987 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005988 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005989 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005990 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5991 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5992 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005993 }
5994
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005995 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5996 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005997 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005998
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005999 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6000 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6001
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006002 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6003 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
6004
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006005 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6006 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6007 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006008 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
6009 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00006010
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00006011 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6012
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006013 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6014 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006015 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006016 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006017 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006018
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00006019 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006020 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006021 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006022 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6023 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006024 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006025 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6026 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006027 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006028 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006029 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6030 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006031 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006032 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6033 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006034 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006035 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6036 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006037 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006038 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6039 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006040 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006041 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6042 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006043 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006044 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6045 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006046 }
6047
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006048 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006049}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006050
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006051bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6052 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006053 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006054 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006055 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006056 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006057}